2009 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat:
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
The driver seat may have power reclining seatbacks.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Power Recline shown
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the buttons that
control the driver and front
passenger heated seats
are located on the climate
control panel. See Climate
page 3-20.
Press the button to turn on the seat at the high setting.
Both lights below the heated seat symbol are lit.
Press the button a second time to turn the seat to the
low setting. Only the bottom light is lit. Press the button
a third time to turn the heated seat off.
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar shown
On vehicles with manual lumbar, the lever is located on
the outboard side of the driver seat near the front of
the seat cushion. Lift up or push down on the lever
repeatedly to increase or decrease lumbar support.
The heated seat feature must be turned on again each
time the ignition is turned off and back on.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Passenger Seat with Manual Recline and Power
Seat Control shown
To operate a manual reclining seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
Power Reclining Seatback
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Power Recline shown
The driver seat may have a power reclining seatback.
The control used to operate it is located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion rear of the horizontal power
seat control.
• Press the control rearward to recline the seatback.
• Press the control forward to raise the seatback.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Flip and Fold Feature
On vehicles with this feature, you can flip the bottom
seat cushion(s) forward and fold the seatback(s) down to
create an extended flat cargo area.
The vehicle may have a front center seat. There are
cupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To use
them, flip the seat cushion forward. The seat can also
be used as a storage area by lowering the seatback.
The seatback doubles as an armrest for the driver or
front passenger when the center seat is unoccupied.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this feature:
3. Lower the seatback(s)
by pulling forward on
the tab located on
1. Make sure the front seats are not reclined. If they
are, the seat cushion will not flip forward completely.
the outboard side of the
seatback(s).
2. Flip the bottom seat cushion forward by pulling up
on the tab located in the center of the seat cushion
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seats to the normal position:
2. Ensure that the safety belts are properly stowed
over the seatback in all three positions.
3. Flip the bottom seat cushion back into place. Push
firmly on the seat cushion to make sure it is secure.
{ CAUTION:
When the seat is not in use, the seatback should
be placed in an upright, locked position, and the seat
cushion should be in the down position.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Under Seat Storage
The vehicle also has an under seat storage area.
To access the storage area, lift up on the tab located in
the center of the bottom seat cushion where the seat
page 2-43 for more information.
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if
your vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-65.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has shoulder belt height adjusters for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
1. Pull the guide out from the pocket on the edge of the
seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into the storage
pocket on the edge of the seatback.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 1-27.
Your vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have
a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in
to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt.
For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
additional information.
{ CAUTION:
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel behind each head restraint.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
Rear Seat
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Push on the depression at the rear of the
cover and swing the lid open to expose the
top tether anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-45
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
{ CAUTION:
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-45
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
page 3-29.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-65 for more information.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
Where Are the Airbags?
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rollovers
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck.
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-62 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbags,
and roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off
the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
• The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit, and
the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
• Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in
may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is
on the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child
restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See Airbag
information.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is
not desired, remove the object from the seat.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-17.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-36
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and the
driver’s door.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-8 for more information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q
is pressed again within five seconds. See DIC Vehicle
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
" (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If " is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If
enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission
must be in P (Park).
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and the
horn sounds three times. Press and hold L for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn
signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition
must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm
to work.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “Remote Key” under DIC
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
Battery Replacement
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. It
may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the
remote start system is active and the vehicle has an
automatic climate control system, it will automatically
regulate the inside temperature. Normal operation
of these systems will return after the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for two to four seconds or
until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension. The
first start must expire or be canceled to get two separate
10 minute starts.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes from the time you repeat the steps for
remote starting. The remote start running time can be
extended one time and only after the first remote start.
After the engine has been started two times, or one time
with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 for information regarding the ignition
positions on your vehicle.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
• The content theft-deterrent alarm has been
activated.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use the key in the driver door or use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock
and unlock the vehicle. From the inside, use the manual
or power door locks.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock the driver side door from the outside
with the key, insert the key and turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, push or pull
the manual lock knob.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to delay the actual locking
of the doors. When the driver power door lock switch
is pressed with the key removed from the ignition,
and the driver door open, a chime will sound three times
to signal that the delayed locking system is active.
When all doors have been closed, the doors will lock
automatically after several seconds. If any door is
opened before this, the timer will reset itself once all the
doors have been closed again.
A power door lock switch
is located on both front
doors next to the door
handle.
Pressing the driver or passenger power door lock switch
again or the RKE transmitter button will override this
feature.
Personal Choice Programming
Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors or press
the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off,
using the Driver Information Center (DIC) to program this
feature. See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” under DIC
If the vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches will
be disabled. You must use the RKE transmitter or the
key to unlock the doors when the system is armed. See
Automatic Door Lock
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has the
following:
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever
is moved into P (Park) all doors will unlock.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various unlock
settings. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
To use the lock:
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
Trunk
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent you from locking the doors
while the key is in the ignition. Always remember to take
your key with you when exiting the vehicle.
If the lock switch is pressed on the door that is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the open door will unlock. A chime sounds
continuously until the driver door is closed.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
Remote Trunk Release
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
G (Remote Trunk Release): Press the button
located next to the exterior lamps control on the left side
of the instrument panel to open the trunk. The shift
lever must be in P (Park).
The trunk can also be opened by lowering the rear seat
and pulling the emergency trunk release handle
page 1-10 and “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
on the latch inside the trunk. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The switches on the driver door armrest are used to
control each of the windows. Each passenger door has
its own window switch.
The power window switches work while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
To lower the window, press and hold the front of the
switch to the first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the window, pull up and hold
the front of the switch.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Visor Vanity Mirror
The driver window switch has an express-down feature
labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the window
completely without holding the switch. Press the front of
the switch to the second position and release.
Swing down the sun visors and lift the cover to expose
the vanity mirror. Do not drive with the cover lifted
due to possible glare impeding other drivers behind or
to the side of the vehicle.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up
on the switch.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Window Lockout
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
o (Window Lockout): The driver window switches
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows and the front passenger can control their
own window with the lockout on. Press the left side of
the switch to return to normal window operation. A
red bar on the right side of the switch indicates that the
lockout is off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If
you are using the RKE transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can be detached from the center retainer and slid along
the rod to cover different areas of the front window
and turned to cover the side windows.
3. Close all doors.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter or a
key or turns the ignition on with an incorrect key. The
horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash
for about 30 seconds.
Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when you use your RKE
transmitter to unlock the doors.
The first time a remote unlock command is received,
three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps heard to
indicate an alarm condition has occurred since last
arming.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened
with the RKE transmitter. The power door lock switches
are disabled and the doors remain locked. You must
use your RKE transmitter or your key to unlock the doors
when the system is armed.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when you use your key to
unlock the doors or insert your key in the ignition and
turn it from the LOCK/OFF position.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
The alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and
the key is removed from the ignition. The alarm
system will not arm if the truck is open when you use
either power lock switch to lock the doors.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Arming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when you use your RKE
transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is not in
the ignition.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
New Vehicle Break-In
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from left to
right while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the radio and windshield wipers
while the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY,
turn the key clockwise.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The
switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
and the brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand, see your
dealer/retailer.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is in the
page 3-49 for more information.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. This is the only position in
which the ignition key can be inserted or removed.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio will continue to work
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened. The power
windows will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or
until any door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the diagonal
brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Active Fuel Management™
(5.3L V8 Engine)
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle’s engine may be equipped with Active Fuel
Management. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on driving conditions.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or
merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
The automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column or on the console between the seats.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If
page 4-28.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brakes first, then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
There is a display, located on the instrument panel
cluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic
transmission vehicles while in P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
protect driveline components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
on page 4-19.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear and
the vehicle will have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You
can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads. You
would also want to use the brakes off and on.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver door.
Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for more than 25 miles
(40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h) may
damage the transmission. Also, shifting into
2 (Second) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in 3 (Third) or D (Drive)
instead of 2 (Second).
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the shift lever is in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push down the parking brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and push the parking brake pedal. When you lift
your foot off the parking brake pedal, the pedal will
follow it to the released position.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A warning chime will sound and a brake warning light
located on the instrument panel cluster will come
on, if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on and the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Steering Column Shift Lever
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as
it will go.
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
page 2-26 for more information.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Into Park
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If
page 4-28.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console Shift Lever
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
{ CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle
and then to the left.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
page 2-26 for more information.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This
happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in this section.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into P (Park).
4. Press the shift lever button
5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
Shifting Out of Park
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
Column Shift
If the column shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in P (Park)
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. See
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of a
an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Console Shift
If the console shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
{ CAUTION:
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
{ CAUTION:
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may
block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it
on and off.
Mirrors
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information
about OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. See
about the service OnStar® provides.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the mirror
for nighttime use. Return the lever to its original position
for the day position.
Outside Power Mirrors
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See
your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar®
page 2-33 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System.
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located beneath the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.
Press the button located below the mirror, on the far
left, for up to three seconds to turn the dimming feature
off and on.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
outside rearview mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger”
information.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit
a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the
keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the
doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial
minutes good for 60 days, is available on most vehicles.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial
route, is available on most vehicles. Press the
OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact
Roadside Service.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.
After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select
a monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If
a payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and
all services, including airbag notification and emergency
services, may be deactivated and no longer available.
For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca
(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with
an advisor.
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few
simple voice commands to browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is
pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the
airbags or AACN system deploy.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This information usually includes the vehicle’s GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that the vehicle was
involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network capacity and
reception when the service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code.
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 will
now become the button strokes to be entered
into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings written
down in Step 2, in order from left to right,
into the Universal Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need to
be held for up to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Storage Area
Storage Areas
For vehicles with a split folding rear seat, there are two
storage areas underneath. Pull the tab(s) located by
the passenger side safety belt buckle and the driver side
rear seat to access the storage areas. See Split
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
Rear Seat Armrest
Cupholders may be built into the front center console,
front portion of the front center seat, and rear armrest of
the vehicle.
For vehicles with a rear seat armrest, pull the tab on the
armrest forward to access it.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Convenience Net
A storage compartment for sunglasses may be located
above the rearview mirror. Push on cover to open
the compartment.
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a front center console storage area,
open it by pulling up on the latch located in the front of
the console lid.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press this switch once to
vent the sunroof when it is closed. When using the vent,
the sunshade should be fully opened. The sunshade
can be opened or closed manually by sliding it rearward
or forward.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the sunroof switches are
located on the overhead
console.
From the vent position, press this switch again to
activate the express-open feature. Press the close
switch to stop movement of the sunroof. The sunshade
will automatically open when using express-open.
A deflector will automatically pop up when the sunroof
is opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
R (Close): Press and hold this switch until the sunroof
motor stops to close the sunroof, or release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
The sunroof can only be operated when the ignition is
in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-39
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are listed here:
page 2-12.
(If Equipped).
T. Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped).
(If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others that
you have a problem.
A tilt wheel allows the steering wheel to be adjusted
before driving. The steering wheel can be raised to
the highest level for more room when entering and
exiting the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of
the steering column.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
| : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel to a comfortable position
and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is completed. If the lever is briefly pressed and released,
the turn signal flashes three times.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
2 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb might be
burned out.
L Q : Windshield Washer
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-97.
Flash-to-Pass.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-12.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Windshield Wipers
If either one of the turn signals are left on and the
vehicle has been driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),
a chime will sound.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers stop
after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more
wipe cycles.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.
Flash-to-Pass
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen
or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the
windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely.
If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or
blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that
you want to pass.
If the headlamps are off or in the low-beam position,
pull the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily
switch to high-beams.
Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
At the top of the multifunction lever, there is a paddle
with the windshield washer symbol on it. Push the
paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
The wipers run for several sweeps and then either
stop or return to the preset speed. The ignition key
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this to
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
When the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit
wheel spin and the cruise control automatically turns off.
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) for 60 seconds. When
the ignition is turned off, this message displays again for
three seconds to remind you that the fluid level is low.
Until the fluid reservoir is refilled, every time the vehicle
is started, the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 3-49.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to the
page 3-25.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off.
The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.
1. Press the T button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If cruise control is set at a desired speed and the
brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.
However, it does not need to be reset.
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
Once your vehicle reaches a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle goes back to the previously
selected speed and stays there.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
will slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brakes
are applied the cruise control will turn off.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T button on the steering wheel.
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased by
turning off the cruise control or the ignition.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below. When the headlamps
are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps
will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the
vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes
before automatically turning off to prevent the battery
from being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off
and then back to the headlamp on position to make
the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
O (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again will turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the off position only works when the vehicle
is shifted into the P (Park) position.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• License Plate Lamps
# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): Turns on the fog lamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps go off
and the DRL come on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument
panel because it works with the DRL.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
Fog Lamps
# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
• The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The engine is running.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps, taillamps,
sidemarker, and other lamps are not on. The instrument
panel and cluster are also not on.
Press # to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will
come on in the instrument panel cluster.
The headlamps automatically change from DRL to
the regular headlamps depending on the darkness of
the surroundings. The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and
stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with
this symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps
control to the left of the steering wheel. Push the knob
in all the way until it extends out and then turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or
dim the lights. Push the knob back in when finished.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay on while it is open
and then turn off automatically about 20 seconds after
the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed and
no door is opened, the lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you
to enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually
turn these lamps on by fully turning the instrument panel
brightness control clockwise.
Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.
With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at
the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim and
then go out. The delay time is canceled if the ignition
key is turned to ON/RUN or the power door lock switch
is pressed. The lamps will dim right away.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless
a door is opened.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp comes on when a door is opened.
This lamp can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed Exit Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Immediately after all the doors have been
closed, the delayed entry lighting feature continues to
work until one of the following occurs:
The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination activates
and remains on until one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• The power door locks are activated.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
• An illumination period of about 25 seconds has
elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period is canceled and the interior
lamps remain on.
Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of
the instrument panel displays during the daylight while
the headlamps are on so that the displays are still
able to be seen.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Mirror Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps on the rearview mirror.
Push the button to turn the reading lamps on and off.
Electric Power Management
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
This feature helps prevent the battery from
being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps,
reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk
lamp are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps
are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes,
if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on
again until one of the following occurs:
The vehicle has three 12-volt outlets which can be
used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
On vehicles with a center console, one outlet is located
inside the center floor console and two outlets are located
at the front of the console bin under the instrument panel.
Lift the cover to access the outlet. Close the cover when
not using the outlet.
• The ignition is turned on.
On vehicles without a center console, two are located
under the climate controls and another outlet for the rear
seat passengers is at the rear of the center front seat.
Remove the cover to access the outlets. When not using
the outlet, make sure the cover is closed.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.
The headlamps will time-out after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in
for an extended period of time while the vehicle is
off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle and adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
the power accessory plugs.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and a cigarette lighter.
The ashtray and cigarette lighter may be located in the
console, if the vehicle has one, otherwise, they may be
located in the center armrest of the front seat.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of 20 amps.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Control: Turn the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the temperature on
the driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Positioning the
knob between two modes, can select a combination of
those modes.
The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation
can be controlled with this system. For vehicles
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need
to be replaced. There will be some airflow noticeable
from the various outlets when driving, even with the fan
in the off position. For more information, see Passenger
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode
Control
E. Air Conditioning
F. Heated Seats
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
H. Rear Window
Defogger
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some of the air directed to the windshield and side
window outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that it is on. The air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan is
on and the outside temperature is above freezing.
A flashing indicator light indicates that the air
conditioning compressor is currently not available.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
moisture. Air is directed equally to the windshield and the
floor outlets. When defog is selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield with
some air to the side window vents and the floor vents.
When defrost is selected, the system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the H mode.
2. Press the # button.
3. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.
4. Select the highest 9 speed.
5. When the coolest temperature is selected in the
A/C mode, the system automatically goes into the
recirculation mode to improve cooling.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air inside
the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water may drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
< (Rear Window Defogger): The rear window
defogger turns off automatically after it has been
activated for 10 minutes. It can be turned off manually,
by pressing the button again or by turning the ignition
to the LOCK/OFF position. The rear window defogger
can be turned on again for additional window clearing.
The length of defogger operation will increase if the
vehicle is being driven.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn on outside air.
An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
Outside air will circulate throughout the vehicle.
For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface
of the mirror when the rear window defog button is
? (Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculation
mode. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
This mode helps to quickly heat or cool the air inside the
vehicle once the temperature inside the vehicle is equal
to or better than the outside temperature. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode is not available in outside air,
floor, defog or defrost modes. If the button is selected
while in these modes, the indicator flashes three times.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the thumbwheel located below or to the side of the
outlet, to change the direction of the air flow.
The vehicle has a passenger compartment particulate
air filter. It is located in the engine compartment,
below the air inlet grille on the passenger side.
Operation Tips
The filter traps most of the pollen from air
entering the climate control system. It needs to be
changed periodically to ensure system performance.
For information on how often to change the passenger
page 6-4.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
To change the passenger compartment air filter:
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter, if equipped, may need to replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
page 6-4.
3. Pull back the hood weatherstrip from the
passengers side of the vehicle halfway to center.
• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes
with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn
on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the
engine is started to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
4. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
5. Lift the air inlet grille and disconnect the washer
hose at the quick-connect.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
7. Remove the water deflector plate.
8. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
For best climate control system performance, reinstall
the air filter.
For the type of filter to use, see Maintenance
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel has been used and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (used in the United States) or
in kilometers (used in Canada).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If the
odometer displays ERROR, it probably has been
tampered with and the numbers might not be accurate.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it
must be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it will be set at zero and
a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the
old mileage reading of the vehicle when the new
odometer was installed.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started,
Safety Belt Reminder Light
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
more information. The passenger safety belt light,
located on the instrument panel, comes on and stays
on for several seconds and then flashes for several more.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have
the vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
immediately.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working well.
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light also comes on when the parking brake is set.
The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or
the pedal can go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
{ CAUTION:
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
page 3-30.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is limiting wheel spin or assisting with controlling
the vehicle.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
If it stays on or comes on while driving a SERVICE
TRACTION CONTROL message appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). This indicates that there could
be a problem with the traction control system and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is
on and the SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message
appears on the DIC, the system does not limit wheel spin.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the traction control system is manually turned off, this
light comes on and the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message appears on the DIC.
For vehicles with a Traction
Control System (TCS) and
StabiliTrak® warning light,
this light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
more information.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving a
SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears in the DIC.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system and the vehicle
may need service. When this warning light is on and
the SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears on the
DIC, the ESC system does not assist in controlling
the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control Indicator
Light
This light comes on
briefly while the engine
is started. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working
normally the indicator
light will then go off.
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is assisting in controlling the vehicle.
information.
This light can come on after the vehicle is first driven
and the STABILITRAK NOT READY message appears
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Electronic
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light goes off.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves toward the “H” (United States) or
toward the shaded thermostat (Canada), it means that
the engine coolant has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off
the road, stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
information.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
for more information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light is On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
information.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to
come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle
warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
several days of routine driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-16.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with the fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the fuel tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when while turning a corner
or speeding up.
• The gage does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage indicates about
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the speedometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
the trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The bottom line of the DIC shows the shift
lever position indicator. See Automatic Transmission
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. The compass
direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC
display. The outside air temperature automatically
appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display.
If there is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
instantaneous economy, Active Fuel Management™
indicator on vehicles with this feature, and average
speed.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
more information.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip A and Trip B
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, compass zone
and compass calibration on vehicles with this feature, and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the
last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer
is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)
before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset
feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km).
As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then
increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display
will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last ignition cycle.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset this display to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling.
Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Management™ Indicator
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate
will change if driving conditions change. For example, if
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though the same
amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different fuel economies.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving.
Press the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMY displays.
If your vehicle has the Active Fuel Management™
feature, INST ECONOMY 8CYL MODE will display
on vehicles with a V8 engine. This display shows the
current fuel economy at a particular moment and
will change frequently as driving conditions change.
This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy
in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). Unlike average economy, this screen
cannot be reset.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message displays. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” under
information.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the Active Fuel Management™
feature, an Active Fuel Management™ indicator
will display on the right side of the DIC, while
INST ECONOMY displays on the left side. Active
Fuel Management™ allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders, depending on
your driving demands.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert
you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
For vehicles with a V8 engine, when Active Fuel
Management™ is active, 4CYL MODE will display.
When Active Fuel Management™ is inactive,
8CYL MODE will display.
page 2-23 for more information.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
page 5-17. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
for more information.
Average Speed
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
(km/h). This average is calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value, press and hold the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Change Compass Zone
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 3-47.
Tire Pressure
Calibrate Compass
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be
viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Press the vehicle information button again until the
DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass
can be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relearn Remote Key
DIC Compass
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
DIC Warnings and Messages
Compass Calibration Procedure
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press the set/reset button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the DIC display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons
also acknowledges and clears any messages. Some
messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
The DIC display will then return to PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the
vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life” under DIC
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the
page 3-42. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
page 3-35.
This message displays when the system detects that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level.
The battery saver system starts reducing certain features
of the vehicle that you may be able to notice. At the point
that the features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in
the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for the
for more information.
Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-31 for more information.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned
off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
A/C operation automatically resumes. You can continue
to drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible to avoid compressor damage.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
ERROR
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of
page 5-17 for more information.
This message displays while viewing the odometer or
trip odometers if there is a problem with the instrument
panel cluster. See your dealer/retailer for service.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light
on page 3-39.
HOOD OPEN
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed
properly. Make sure that the hood is closed completely.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when the front passenger door
is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are no
longer working. Have the climate control system serviced
by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and
air conditioning efficiency.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
for more information.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed properly. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. Have the system inspected by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays when service is required on
the brake system. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. The brake
system warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a problem is detected
with the power steering system. When this message is
displayed, you may notice that the effort required to steer
the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will still be
able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
SERVICE STABILITRAK
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays if there has been a problem
detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Electronic Stability
System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on
the TPMS is not working properly. The tire pressure
light also flashes and then remains on during the same
Several conditions may cause this message to appear.
for more information. If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the system is not functioning
properly. A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Have the TCS serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16 for more information.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may be displayed if the gas cap is not
on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to ensure
for more information.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The ESC system is not functional until the light has turned
more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
TRACTION CONTROL ON
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays when
the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS is turned on.
for more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS turns off.
for more information.
TRUNK OPEN
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
TURN SIGNAL ON
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-8 for more information.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off,
or a turn is completed.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soon
page 5-14 for the location of the windshield washer
page 5-35 for more information.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed
on the DIC.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
for more information.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time
you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows you
to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
{ CAUTION:
page 4-2.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Date Display
Setting the Clock
Single CD (MP3) Player
Without Date Display
This radio has a H button for setting the time.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD
Player
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
This radio has a H button for setting the time.
To set the time:
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs to be changed.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
1. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
on display. Press H a second time and the
minutes begin flashing on display.
2. To increase or decrease the time, do one of the
following while the hours or minutes are flashing:
• Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.
• Turn the f knob clockwise.
• Turn the f knob.
• Press ¨SEEK.
• Press \ FWD.
• Press ¨SEEK or ©SEEK.
• Press \ FWD or s REV.
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
3. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time,
or wait five seconds until the flashing stops and the
current time displayed is automatically set.
• Turn the f knob counter-clockwise.
• Press ©SEEK.
• Press s REV.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is displayed.
Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn the f knob to the
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
desired option to select the setting. Press the H button
again to apply the setting, or let the screen time out.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player
date press the MENU button and then the H button
while the radio is on. The date with display times
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.
This type of radio has a MENU button instead of the
clock button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Once the H option displays, press the pushbutton
located under that tab. HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
displays.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow tab. Once the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
• Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.
• Turn the f knob clockwise.
• Press ¨SEEK.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
• Press \ FWD.
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
• Turn the f knob counter-clockwise.
• Press ©SEEK.
• Press s REV.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The Radio
with CD (MP3) and the Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
have SCV. SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume
to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle
increases or decreases speed while driving. The volume
level should sound about the same while driving.
To activate SCV:
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have the Radio Data System (RDS)
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
Playing the Radio
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
The radio goes to the previous volume setting when the
radio is turned on. The volume can still be adjusted
by using the volume knob.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
(Radio with CD (Base))
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™. The selection displays.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons. To program presets:
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the previous or the next
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to
switch the display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press to display
the time.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
4 (Information) (With XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press to display additional
text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM
station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the
song title information displays on the top line of the
display and artist information displays on the bottom
line. When information is not available, No Info displays.
If the vehicle has XM and has a FAV button, a maximum
of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using
the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button).
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): Press to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a
station as a favorite:
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones, such as BASS, MID,
and TREB. To adjust the tone settings, press the f knob
until the tone control tabs display. Press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired tab, then turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button
until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s
frequency is weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange, or
treble to the middle position by pressing the pushbutton
positioned under the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB
(treble) tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
beeps once.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to the manual mode, press until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass and
depending on the radio, midrange, or treble by
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
pressing the f knob.
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature. To select and find a desired category:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired
category name displays.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the ` if the radio has this symbol, or
the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired tab. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
setting. The setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV until the
desired levels are obtained.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the pushbutton positioned
under the BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display favorites again.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all speaker
and tone controls to the middle position by pressing
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
Loc or Locked: If Loc or Locked displays, it means the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer for service.
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the
Restore All tab.
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles that have a Radio with a Six-Disc CD
player:
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Playing a CD
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3. Press this button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z EJECT: For the Radio with a Single CD player,
press to eject the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
For the Radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press and
release to eject the CD that is currently playing. The radio
beeps once and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. Press and hold for two seconds to eject all discs.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs
in a Six-disc CD player.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
To use random on the base radio with Single CD player,
press the RDM button to play tracks from a CD in random
order. The random icon displays. Press again to turn off
random play. The random icon disappears from the
display.
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
To use random on an Uplevel Radio with a Single CD
player:
1. Press the CD/AUX button, insert a disc partway into
the slot of the CD player. A RDM tab displays.
2. To play the tracks in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use random on a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
Found may display.
1. Press the CD/AUX button, press and hold ^ .
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Insert one or more discs partway into the slot
of the CD player.
2. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat on the base radio with a Single CD
player:
• Press and release the RPT button to repeat
the current track. An arrow symbol displays.
Press again to turn off repeat play.
• Press and hold the RPT button for a few seconds
to repeat the CD. An arrow symbol displays. Press
again to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off,
the symbol no longer displays.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of the CD Player
CD Messages
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc
capability. For more information, see Using an MP3
on page 3-77 later in this section.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
O (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease
the volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might need to be made from the portable
device.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and the
system begins playing audio from the connected portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
No Aux Input Device Found may display.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Format
Using an MP3
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
The radio may have MP3 capability. With this feature,
the radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Song title, artist name, and album
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
Compressed Audio
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT button
toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio
format.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
No Folder
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the f knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
file folders can also be played. If a CD contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
and 255 files, the player lets you access and navigate
up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum
cannot be accessed.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
searches playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, you do not have playlist
editing capability using the radio. These playlists
are treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Insert a CD partway into the slot (Single CD Player),
or press the load button and wait for the message
to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up.
The player pulls it in, and the CD should begin playing.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD currently playing.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
h (Music Navigator): If the radio has the MP3
feature, it has the music navigator feature to play
MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or
album. Press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator tab. The player scans the disc to sort the files
by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take
several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio might begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD
begins playing again.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files by that artist. If you
want to listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The CD
goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist
displays.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD
or all discs in a Six-Disc CD player. To use random,
do one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the CD that
is currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a Six-Disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album have played, the player moves
to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3 files from that album.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Information: No text or informational messages
are available at this time on this channel. The system
is working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having the vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
Bluetooth®
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the order
the phone was paired.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle,
the system will say “Is connected” after the
connected phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.
Use a name that best describes the phone.
This name will be used to indicate which phone
is connected. The system then confirms the name
provided.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking to a Different Phone
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Deleting Name Tags
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
• Delete all name tags
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Using the Delete Command
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Calls can be made using the following commands:
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say
the first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
• Digit Dial
• Call
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
followed by a tone.
switch to the call on hold.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
To Cancel Mute
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on
how to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems, press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and auxiliary input jack.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while
in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD. Press the ¨if multiple
discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a
CD player.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD is playing.
c x (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a CD is
playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If
the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise might be
heard, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does
not have ABS, the first reaction — to hit the brake pedal
hard and hold it down — might be the wrong thing to
do. The wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the
vehicle cannot respond to the driver’s steering.
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could be
off the road, into the very thing the driver was trying
to avoid, or into traffic.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on
the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This helps retain steering control. With ABS, it is
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
When the light is on solid and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message is displayed, the system will not
assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message will appear, and the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid to warn the driver that both
traction control and ESC are disabled.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you
ever need to.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
page 3-9.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The SERVICE
STABILITRAK message and the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the problem does not clear after restarting the vehicle,
you should see your dealer/retailer for service. See
information.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged when road
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the transmission
only as high as the shift lever position chosen, so
use the lower gears only when necessary. See
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift
the transmission and apply the front brakes to limit
wheel spin.
When the system is on,
this warning light comes
on and stays on if there is
a problem.
A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message also
appears on the DIC. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-49 for more information.
This light will flash
when the TCS is limiting
wheel spin.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, TCS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the system off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
on page 4-19 for more information.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
To turn the system on or
off, press the Traction
Control button located on
the instrument panel.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
When the system is turned off, the traction control
warning light comes on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF
appears on the DIC. If the traction control system is
limiting wheel spin when the button is pressed to turn the
system off, the warning light comes on and the system
will turn off right away.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Press the Traction Control button again to turn the
system back on. The Traction Control warning light
should go off.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the
vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the
as much speed as possible from a collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to
13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If
the vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling
again. This restores steering control. Push the brake
pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As
long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering
control.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When tired, pull off the road.
Driving at Night
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
• Do not drink and drive.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-53.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 4-8, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the traction control system to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
{ CAUTION:
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions causes a rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
page 4-26.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
page 5-60.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
lists the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and
all nonfactory-installed options.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity
weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle
from the front:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,
a dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is
different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/
retailer for advice and information about towing a
trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the driver and the
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
more information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit
for the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are,
then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch
is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
water, and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
information.
Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
If parking the rig on a hill:
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-31.
• shift into a gear, and
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
• release the parking brake.
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
page 5-8. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Fuel
For all vehicles except those with the 5.3L V8 engine
(VIN Code C), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise
when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles
that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85
fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system. Do not
add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle
has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow
and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on the
hook on the inside of the fuel door.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If
you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This
may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light
and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-36.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left of the
parking brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center of
the hood front, by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
on page 5-98.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
page 5-40.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
on page 5-34.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
on page 5-98.
page 5-40.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-34.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
V6 Engine
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
Look for three things:
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed
for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
more information on location.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
hinges on the housing.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have
to drive longer.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle is the black
loop with this symbol on
it. It is located near
the rear of the engine
compartment.
V6 Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
for more information on location.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Fluid
Cooling System
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.9L Engine similar
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-31
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
What to Use
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
page 6-12 for more information.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If
coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. See Engine Coolant Engine Coolant
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do
not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If your vehicle has one of the V6 engines, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or
above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recovery tank.
To check the coolant level, look for the COLD FILL line
on the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces the
engine. If the level is not correct, there may be a leak in
the cooling system.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the cooling system through the
coolant fill neck on the engine, but be sure the system
is cool before you do it.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose is no longer
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means
that there is still some
pressure left.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the
engine and the compartment.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel that indicate an overheated
engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature
page 3-34 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
5. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap. After a day or two of driving, when the
engine is cold, check the coolant level in the recovery
tank. If it is low, refill it to the COLD FILL line.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed on the vehicle’s Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
for more information.
If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealer/retailer service department
inspect the vehicle for leaks.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
on page 5-34 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see ‘‘Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode’’
later in this section.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located toward
the rear of the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The coolant temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, you should add fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when
you need to add windshield washer fluid to your vehicle.
information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
more information on location.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the
reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the fuse block
cover. You should always
use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the
positive (+) terminal on the
battery.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose. The remote
positive (+) terminal is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,
on the underhood fuse block. See Engine
information on location.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location of the vehicle with the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
Jumper Cable Removal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab on
the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn clockwise
until it stops.
10. Reinstall the dust caps.
3. Pull up on the plastic headlamp retainer and
remove it.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
and remove the electrical connector.
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access to the
bulbs.
6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the retaining ring by pulling it away from the
headlamp.
11. Push the headlamp assembly toward the vehicle.
7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Push down on the plastic headlamp retainer to
reinstall it.
13. Reinstall the screw from the headlamp assembly.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
2. Remove the convenience net. Unhook the net from
the upper wing nut.
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
3. Turn the upper wing nut counterclockwise and
remove it.
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal
4. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Push the taillamp assembly back into place.
When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, make sure
that you line up the four posts on the assembly
with the slots in the vehicle.
12. Turn the two hex nuts clockwise to reinstall them.
13. Put the carpet back in place at the rear of the vehicle.
5. Turn the two hex nuts counterclockwise to
remove them.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect the
wiring harness.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out to remove it.
14. Turn the upper wing nut clockwise to reinstall.
9. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
install it.
15. Put the convenience net back into place by hooking
it to the upper wing nut.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the
wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Turn the lamp assembly counterclockwise and pull
the lamp assembly out of the connector.
2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp assembly, keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
921
Back-Up
Front Parking/Turn Signal
License Plate Lamp
Headlamps
3157NAK
194
High-Beam
Low-Beam
Sidemarker
H9
H11
194
2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from the
blade connecting point, and pull the blade assembly
down toward the windshield to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip down into place.
Stoplamp, Taillamp, and Turn
Signal
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of
the wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the wiper
blade element on both sides.
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{ CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
page 5-75.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-60.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-60.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-20.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-68.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-49.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off
as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to
be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-20.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on
your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-62.
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far it
has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust, or remove the device if it is contacting
your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
page 3-6.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION: (Continued)
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the compact spare tire.
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If needed, use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry
along the edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of
the wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay it face
down, as it could become scratched or damaged. Store
the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire is repaired or
replaced.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum wheels with exposed
wheel nuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel wheels with plastic
covers.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
a Flat Tire on page 5-76
To remove the plastic covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction. If needed, finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps will not
come off.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise once on
each wheel nut to loosen them. Do not remove
them yet.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
3. For all wheel types, find the jacking location using
the diagram above and the corresponding jacking
notches located on the bottom side of the plastic
molding. The notches in the plastic molding are
marked with a triangle shape to help you find them.
The front location is about 7.0 inches (17.7 cm) from
the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground to install the compact spare tire.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
8. Install the compact spare tire.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Reinstall the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut
clockwise by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION:
sequence as shown.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-101 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store a full-size tire:
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole
and threaded onto the bolt screw.
{ CAUTION:
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
extension protector, located in the foam holder, to
help avoid wheel surface damage.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Retainer
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system may not work correctly when the compact
spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case
you need it again.
Compact Spare Tire
{ CAUTION:
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a
time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact
spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation
monitor system after installing or removing the compact
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
If dirt and/or contaminants build up in the glass seals,
use a cloth and water to clean the glass seals. Silicone
grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer,
seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp
weather, frequent application may be required. See
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the
vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-92.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
the surface could be damaged. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair
or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies
anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to
restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is in the trunk. It is very helpful if parts need
to be ordered. The label has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
the vehicle’s engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper
will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused
by some electrical problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The fuse block is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse block
door to access the fuses.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
PWR/MIR
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW
RAP
Usage
Power Mirrors
Power Seats
Power Window
Retained Accessory Power
Sunroof
S/ROOF
TRUNK
Trunk
TRUNK
XM
Trunk Relay
XM™ Radio
Underhood Fuse Block
Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
Usage
Airbags
Amplifier
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
page 5-14 for more information on location.
AUX
Auxiliary Outlets
Canister
CNSTR
DR/LCK
HTD/SEAT
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Door Locks
Heated Seats
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Motor 1
ABS MTR 1
ABS MTR 2
AIR PUMP
AIR SOL
ABS Motor 2
Air Pump
Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
Airbag, Display
AUX PWR
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3
BATT 4
BCM
Auxiliary Power
Battery 1
Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 4
Body Control Module (BCM)
CHMSL/
BCK-UP
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamp
DISPLAY
DRL 1
DRL 2
Display
Daytime Running Lamps 1
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Ignition
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
ECM IGN
ECM/TCM
EMISSIONS 1
EMISSIONS 2
Emissions 1
Emissions 2
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
ETC/ECM
FAN 1
Usage
Electronic Throttle Control, ECM
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Fuel Pump
Headlamp Module
Horn
Heated Mirror
Injector 1
Injector 2
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger Side Parking Lamp
Right Spot
Passenger Side Turn Signal Lamp
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Steering Wheel
RT LO BEAM
RT PARK
RT SPOT
RT T/SIG
RVC SEN
STRG WHL
STRTR
TRANS
WPR
WSW
FAN 2
FOG LAMPS
FUEL/PUMP
HDLP MDL
HORN
HTD MIR
INJ 1
Starter
Transmission
Wiper
INJ 2
INT LIGHTS
Windshield Wiper
Interior Lamps
INT LTS/
PNL DIM
LT HI BEAM
LT LO BEAM
LT PARK
Interior Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimmer
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Parking Lamp
Left Spot
Relay
A/C CMPRSR
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 3
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
LT SPOT
LT T/SIG
ONSTAR
Driver Side Turn Signal Lamp
OnStar®
FUEL/PUMP
PWR/TRN
Fuel Pump
Powertrain
PWR DROP/
CRANK
RADIO
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
STRTR Starter
Power Drop, Crank
Audio System
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
RT HI BEAM
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission
7.4 qt
7.0 L
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
10.1 qt
13.3 qt
9.6 L
12.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
4.0 qt
6.0 qt
3.8 L
5.7 L
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
3.5L Engine (with NU6 emissions)
3.5L Engine (without NU6 emissions)
3.9L and 5.3L
17.0 gal
17.5 gal
17.5 gal
100 lb ft
64.4 L
66.2 L
66.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6
N
K
3.5L Flexible Fuel V6
3.9L Flexible Fuel V6
5.3L V8
M
C
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
{ CAUTION:
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
on page 5-5.
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays 10 months or more since the
last service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter, if equipped. See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See footnote (n).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-94 for more information.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console door,
and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(m) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{ CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-60. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-67.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
on page 2-26.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by
the regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
{ CAUTION:
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Power Steering
System
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
page 5-17.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-28.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Engine Oil
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Hood and Door
Hinges
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
AC Delco Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
10350737
A2962C
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
89017342
89017524
15284938
PF61
PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF132
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
12591131
12609877
41-100
41-985
Wiper Blades
Driver - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
Passenger - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
15941731
15941732
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
Customer Assistance and
Information
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada
Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner
disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chevrolet.com
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by
dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
United States — Customer Assistance
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coverage
Roadside Assistance Program
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever
comes first.
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer
for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM
New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is
not known. Such parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-8 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags
in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have
the special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any
other GM system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection and
this manual for more information.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-27
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-24
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
